File: compute_alpha.backendServices.html

package info (click to toggle)
python-googleapi 2.182.0-1
links: PTS
area: main
in suites: forky, sid
size: 533,852 kB
sloc: python: 11,076; javascript: 249; sh: 114; makefile: 59
file content (5329 lines) | stat: -rw-r--r-- 957,650 bytes
<html><body>
<style>

body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
  margin: 0;
  padding: 0;
  border: 0;
  font-weight: inherit;
  font-style: inherit;
  font-size: 100%;
  font-family: inherit;
  vertical-align: baseline;
}

body {
  font-size: 13px;
  padding: 1em;
}

h1 {
  font-size: 26px;
  margin-bottom: 1em;
}

h2 {
  font-size: 24px;
  margin-bottom: 1em;
}

h3 {
  font-size: 20px;
  margin-bottom: 1em;
  margin-top: 1em;
}

pre, code {
  line-height: 1.5;
  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
}

pre {
  margin-top: 0.5em;
}

h1, h2, h3, p {
  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
}

h1, h2, h3 {
  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
}

.toc_element {
  margin-top: 0.5em;
}

.firstline {
  margin-left: 2 em;
}

.method  {
  margin-top: 1em;
  border: solid 1px #CCC;
  padding: 1em;
  background: #EEE;
}

.details {
  font-weight: bold;
  font-size: 14px;
}

</style>

<h1><a href="compute_alpha.html">Compute Engine API</a> . <a href="compute_alpha.backendServices.html">backendServices</a></h1>
<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#addSignedUrlKey">addSignedUrlKey(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Adds a key for validating requests with signed URLs for this backend service.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#aggregatedList">aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Retrieves the list of all BackendService resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#aggregatedList_next">aggregatedList_next()</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#delete">delete(project, backendService, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Deletes the specified BackendService resource.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#deleteSignedUrlKey">deleteSignedUrlKey(project, backendService, keyName, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Deletes a key for validating requests with signed URLs for this backend service.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#get">get(project, backendService, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Returns the specified BackendService resource.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#getEffectiveSecurityPolicies">getEffectiveSecurityPolicies(project, backendService, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Returns effective security policies applied to this backend service.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#getHealth">getHealth(project, backendService, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Gets the most recent health check results for this BackendService. Example request body: { "group": "/zones/us-east1-b/instanceGroups/lb-backend-example" }</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#insert">insert(project, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Creates a BackendService resource in the specified project using the data included in the request. For more information, see Backend services overview .</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#list">list(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Retrieves the list of BackendService resources available to the specified project.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#listUsable">listUsable(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Retrieves a list of all usable backend services in the specified project.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#listUsable_next">listUsable_next()</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next()</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#patch">patch(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Patches the specified BackendService resource with the data included in the request. For more information, see Backend services overview. This method supports PATCH semantics and uses the JSON merge patch format and processing rules.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#setEdgeSecurityPolicy">setEdgeSecurityPolicy(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Sets the edge security policy for the specified backend service.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#setSecurityPolicy">setSecurityPolicy(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Sets the Google Cloud Armor security policy for the specified backend service. For more information, see Google Cloud Armor Overview</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.</p>
<p class="toc_element">
  <code><a href="#update">update(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
<p class="firstline">Updates the specified BackendService resource with the data included in the request. For more information, see Backend services overview.</p>
<h3>Method Details</h3>
<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="addSignedUrlKey">addSignedUrlKey(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Adds a key for validating requests with signed URLs for this backend service.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to which the Signed URL Key should be added. The name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{ # Represents a customer-supplied Signing Key used by Cloud CDN Signed URLs
  &quot;keyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the key. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
  &quot;keyValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # 128-bit key value used for signing the URL. The key value must be a valid RFC 4648 Section 5 base64url encoded string.
}

  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="aggregatedList">aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Retrieves the list of all BackendService resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.

Args:
  project: string, Name of the project scoping this request. (required)
  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `&gt;`, `&lt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) OR (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Broadwell&quot;) AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq &#x27;single quoted literal&#x27;` `fieldname eq &quot;double quoted literal&quot;` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne &quot;literal&quot;)` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name &quot;instance&quot;, you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=&quot;creationTimestamp desc&quot;`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
  serviceProjectNumber: string, The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Contains a list of BackendServicesScopedList.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
  &quot;items&quot;: { # A list of BackendServicesScopedList resources.
    &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Name of the scope containing this set of BackendServices.
      &quot;backendServices&quot;: [ # A list of BackendServices contained in this scope.
        { # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
          &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
          &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
          &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
            { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
              &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
              &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
              &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
                { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
                  &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
                  &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
                },
              ],
              &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
              &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
              &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
              &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
              &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
              &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
              &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
              &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
              &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
              &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
              &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
              &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
              &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
              &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
              &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
            },
          ],
          &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
            &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
              { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
                &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
              },
            ],
            &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
              &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
              &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
              &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
              &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
            &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
            &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
            &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
            &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
            &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
            &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
              { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
                &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
                &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
              },
            ],
            &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
            &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
            &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
            &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
          },
          &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
            &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
              &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
              &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
            },
            &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
            &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
            &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
            &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
            &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
          },
          &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
          &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
            &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
          },
          &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
            &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
            &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
            &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
            &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
          },
          &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
            &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
              &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
              &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
                &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
                &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
              },
            },
            &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
            &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
          },
          &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
          &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
            { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
              &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
            },
          ],
          &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
          &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
            &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
              &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
            },
          },
          &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
          &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
          &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
          &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
          &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
            &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
            &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
            &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
          },
          &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
          &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
            &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
            &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
              &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
              &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
                &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
              },
            },
          },
          &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
            &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
            &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
            &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
              &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
              &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
              &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
            },
            &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
            &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
          },
          &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
          &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
          &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
          &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
          &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
            { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
              &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
                &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
              },
              &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
              },
            },
          ],
          &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
          &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
            &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
            &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
            &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
            &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
          },
          &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
            &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
            &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
          },
          &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
          },
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
          &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
          &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
            &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
              &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
              &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
            },
          },
          &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
            &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
              &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
              &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
            },
            &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
            &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
            &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
            &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
            &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
            &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
              &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
              &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
            },
            &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
            &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
            &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
            &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
          },
          &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
            &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
            },
          },
          &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
          &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
          &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
          &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
          &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
          &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
            &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
            &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
              &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
                { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
                  &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
                    &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
                      &quot;A String&quot;,
                    ],
                    &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
                    &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
                    &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
                      { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                        &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
                      },
                    ],
                    &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
                      &quot;A String&quot;,
                    ],
                  },
                },
              ],
              &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
                { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
                  &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
                    &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
                  },
                },
              ],
              &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
              &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
                &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
                  &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
                    &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                    &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                  },
                  &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
                  &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                    &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                      &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                          &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                        },
                      },
                      &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                          &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                        },
                        &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                      },
                      &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                    },
                  },
                },
                &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
                  &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                    &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                      &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                          &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                        },
                      },
                      &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                          &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                        },
                        &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                      },
                      &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
                },
              },
            },
            &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
              &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
                {
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
                  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
                    { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
                      &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                        { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                          &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                            &quot;A String&quot;,
                          ],
                        },
                      ],
                      &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                    },
                  ],
                  &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
                    { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
                      &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
                      &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                      &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
                      },
                      &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                    },
                  ],
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
              &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
              &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
              &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
              &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
            },
            &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
            &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
              &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
                &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
                  &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
                    &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                    &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                  },
                  &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
                  &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                    &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                      &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                          &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                        },
                      },
                      &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                          &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                        },
                        &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                      },
                      &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                    },
                  },
                },
                &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
                  &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                    &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                      &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                          &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                        },
                      },
                      &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                        &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                          &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                        },
                        &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                      },
                      &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
                },
              },
              &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
              &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
              &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
            &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
          },
          &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
          &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
          &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
          &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
          &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
            &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
            &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
            &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
              &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
              &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
            },
          },
          &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
            &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
            &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
          },
          &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
          &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
            &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
            &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
            &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
            &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
              { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
                &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
                &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
              },
            ],
          },
          &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
            {
              &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
            },
          ],
          &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
        },
      ],
      &quot;warning&quot;: { # Informational warning which replaces the list of backend services when the list is empty.
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
        &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
          {
            &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
          },
        ],
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendServiceAggregatedList&quot;, # Type of resource.
  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
  &quot;unreachables&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Unreachable resources.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;warning&quot;: { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
    &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
    &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
      {
        &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
        &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
      },
    ],
    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
  },
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="aggregatedList_next">aggregatedList_next()</code>
  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.

        Args:
          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)

        Returns:
          A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
        </pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(project, backendService, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Deletes the specified BackendService resource.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to delete. (required)
  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="deleteSignedUrlKey">deleteSignedUrlKey(project, backendService, keyName, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Deletes a key for validating requests with signed URLs for this backend service.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to which the Signed URL Key should be added. The name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
  keyName: string, The name of the Signed URL Key to delete. (required)
  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="get">get(project, backendService, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Returns the specified BackendService resource.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to return. (required)
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
  &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
  &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
    { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
      &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
      &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
      &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
        { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
          &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
          &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        },
      ],
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
      &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
      &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
      &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
      &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  ],
  &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
    &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
      { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
        &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
      },
    ],
    &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
      &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
      &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
    &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
    &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
    &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
      { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
        &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
        &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
      },
    ],
    &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
    &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
    &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
    &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
    &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
    &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  },
  &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
  &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
  },
  &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
    &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
  },
  &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
      &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
      &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
        &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
        &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
      },
    },
    &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
    &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
  },
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
    { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
      &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    },
  ],
  &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
  &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
    &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
    },
  },
  &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
  &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
    &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
    &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
  },
  &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
  &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
    &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
      &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
      &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
        &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
    &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
    &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
      &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
      &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
      &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
    },
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
  },
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
  &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
  &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
    { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
      &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
        &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
      },
      &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
      },
    },
  ],
  &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
    &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
    &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
    &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
  },
  &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
    &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
  },
  &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
  },
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
  &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
  &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
      &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
      &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
    },
  },
  &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
    &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
    &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
    &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
  },
  &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
    &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
      &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  },
  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
  &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
  &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
  &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
    &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
      &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
          &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
            &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
            &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
            &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
              { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
              },
            ],
            &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
          &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
            &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
      &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
    },
    &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
      &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
        {
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
          &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
              &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                  &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                  &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
          &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
              &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
              &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
      ],
    },
    &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
      &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
      &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
      &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
      &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
    },
    &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
    &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
      &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
      &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
      &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
      &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
  &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
    &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
    &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
  },
  &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
  },
  &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
  &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
    &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
    &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
    &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
      { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
        &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
        &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
    {
      &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
    },
  ],
  &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="getEffectiveSecurityPolicies">getEffectiveSecurityPolicies(project, backendService, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Returns effective security policies applied to this backend service.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the Backend Service for this request. (required)
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    {
  &quot;securityPolicies&quot;: [ # Effective security policies for the backend service.
    { # Represents a Google Cloud Armor security policy resource. Only external backend services that use load balancers can reference a security policy. For more information, see Google Cloud Armor security policy overview.
      &quot;adaptiveProtectionConfig&quot;: { # Configuration options for Cloud Armor Adaptive Protection (CAAP).
        &quot;autoDeployConfig&quot;: { # Configuration options for Adaptive Protection auto-deploy feature.
          &quot;confidenceThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
          &quot;expirationSec&quot;: 42,
          &quot;impactedBaselineThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
          &quot;loadThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
        },
        &quot;layer7DdosDefenseConfig&quot;: { # Configuration options for L7 DDoS detection. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR. # If set to true, enables Cloud Armor Machine Learning.
          &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, enables CAAP for L7 DDoS detection. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
          &quot;ruleVisibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rule visibility can be one of the following: STANDARD - opaque rules. (default) PREMIUM - transparent rules. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
          &quot;thresholdConfigs&quot;: [ # Configuration options for layer7 adaptive protection for various customizable thresholds.
            {
              &quot;autoDeployConfidenceThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
              &quot;autoDeployExpirationSec&quot;: 42,
              &quot;autoDeployImpactedBaselineThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
              &quot;autoDeployLoadThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
              &quot;detectionAbsoluteQps&quot;: 3.14,
              &quot;detectionLoadThreshold&quot;: 3.14,
              &quot;detectionRelativeToBaselineQps&quot;: 3.14,
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. The name must be unique within the security policy.
              &quot;trafficGranularityConfigs&quot;: [ # Configuration options for enabling Adaptive Protection to operate on specified granular traffic units.
                { # Configurations to specifc granular traffic units processed by Adaptive Protection.
                  &quot;enableEachUniqueValue&quot;: True or False, # If enabled, traffic matching each unique value for the specified type constitutes a separate traffic unit. It can only be set to true if `value` is empty.
                  &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of this configuration.
                  &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Requests that match this value constitute a granular traffic unit.
                },
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
      },
      &quot;advancedOptionsConfig&quot;: {
        &quot;jsonCustomConfig&quot;: { # Custom configuration to apply the JSON parsing. Only applicable when json_parsing is set to STANDARD.
          &quot;contentTypes&quot;: [ # A list of custom Content-Type header values to apply the JSON parsing. As per RFC 1341, a Content-Type header value has the following format: Content-Type := type &quot;/&quot; subtype *[&quot;;&quot; parameter] When configuring a custom Content-Type header value, only the type/subtype needs to be specified, and the parameters should be excluded.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
        },
        &quot;jsonParsing&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        &quot;logLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        &quot;requestBodyInspectionSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum request size chosen by the customer with Waf enabled. Values supported are &quot;8KB&quot;, &quot;16KB, &quot;32KB&quot;, &quot;48KB&quot; and &quot;64KB&quot;. Values are case insensitive.
        &quot;userIpRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # An optional list of case-insensitive request header names to use for resolving the callers client IP address.
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
      },
      &quot;associations&quot;: [ # A list of associations that belong to this policy.
        {
          &quot;attachmentId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource that the security policy is attached to.
          &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The display name of the security policy of the association.
          &quot;excludedFolders&quot;: [ # A list of folders to exclude from the security policy.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;excludedProjects&quot;: [ # A list of projects to exclude from the security policy.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name for an association.
          &quot;securityPolicyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The security policy ID of the association.
          &quot;shortName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The short name of the security policy of the association.
        },
      ],
      &quot;cloudArmorConfig&quot;: { # Configuration options for Cloud Armor.
        &quot;enableMl&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, enables Cloud Armor Machine Learning.
      },
      &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
      &quot;ddosProtectionConfig&quot;: {
        &quot;ddosAdaptiveProtection&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        &quot;ddosImpactedBaselineThreshold&quot;: 3.14, # Adaptive Protection for Network Load Balancers (and VMs with public IPs) builds DDos mitigations that minimize collateral damage. It quantifies this as the fraction of a non-abuse baseline that&#x27;s inadvertently blocked. Rules whose collateral damage exceeds ddosAdaptiveImpactedBaselineThreshold will not be deployed. Using a lower value will prioritize keeping collateral damage low, possibly at the cost of its effectiveness in rate limiting some or all of the attack. It should typically be between 0.01 and 0.10.
        &quot;ddosProtection&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      },
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # User-provided name of the organization security policy. The name should be unique in the organization in which the security policy is created. This should only be used when SecurityPolicyType is FIREWALL. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1035.txt. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
      &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a fingerprint for this resource, which is essentially a hash of the metadata&#x27;s contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the security policy.
      &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#securityPolicy&quot;, # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#securityPolicyfor security policies
      &quot;labelFingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this security policy, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels. To see the latest fingerprint, make get() request to the security policy.
      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels for this resource. These can only be added or modified by the setLabels method. Each label key/value pair must comply with RFC1035. Label values may be empty.
        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      },
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
      &quot;parent&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The parent of the security policy.
      &quot;recaptchaOptionsConfig&quot;: {
        &quot;redirectSiteKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional field to supply a reCAPTCHA site key to be used for all the rules using the redirect action with the type of GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA under the security policy. The specified site key needs to be created from the reCAPTCHA API. The user is responsible for the validity of the specified site key. If not specified, a Google-managed site key is used. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
      },
      &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional security policy resides. This field is not applicable to global security policies.
      &quot;ruleTupleCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all security policy rule tuples. A security policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
      &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule which is a rule with priority 2147483647 and match all condition (for the match condition this means match &quot;*&quot; for srcIpRanges and for the networkMatch condition every field must be either match &quot;*&quot; or not set). If no rules are provided when creating a security policy, a default rule with action &quot;allow&quot; will be added.
        { # Represents a rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition (allow or deny).
          &quot;action&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Action to perform when the rule is matched. The following are the valid actions: - allow: allow access to target. - deny(STATUS): deny access to target, returns the HTTP response code specified. Valid values for `STATUS` are 403, 404, and 502. - rate_based_ban: limit client traffic to the configured threshold and ban the client if the traffic exceeds the threshold. Configure parameters for this action in RateLimitOptions. Requires rate_limit_options to be set. - redirect: redirect to a different target. This can either be an internal reCAPTCHA redirect, or an external URL-based redirect via a 302 response. Parameters for this action can be configured via redirectOptions. This action is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR. - throttle: limit client traffic to the configured threshold. Configure parameters for this action in rateLimitOptions. Requires rate_limit_options to be set for this. - fairshare (preview only): when traffic reaches the threshold limit, requests from the clients matching this rule begin to be rate-limited using the Fair Share algorithm. This action is only allowed in security policies of type `CLOUD_ARMOR_INTERNAL_SERVICE`.
          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
          &quot;direction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The direction in which this rule applies. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
          &quot;enableLogging&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for a particular rule. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to the configured export destination in Stackdriver. Logs may be exported to BigQuery or Pub/Sub. Note: you cannot enable logging on &quot;goto_next&quot; rules. This field may only be specified when the versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
          &quot;headerAction&quot;: { # Optional, additional actions that are performed on headers. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
            &quot;requestHeadersToAdds&quot;: [ # The list of request headers to add or overwrite if they&#x27;re already present.
              {
                &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the header to set.
                &quot;headerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value to set the named header to.
              },
            ],
          },
          &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#securityPolicyRule&quot;, # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#securityPolicyRule for security policy rules
          &quot;match&quot;: { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding &#x27;action&#x27; is enforced.
            &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration options available when specifying versioned_expr. This field must be specified if versioned_expr is specified and cannot be specified if versioned_expr is not specified.
              &quot;destIpRanges&quot;: [ # CIDR IP address range. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;destPorts&quot;: [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
                {
                  &quot;ipProtocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a firewall rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
                  &quot;ports&quot;: [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: [&quot;22&quot;], [&quot;80&quot;,&quot;443&quot;], and [&quot;12345-12349&quot;]. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;layer4Configs&quot;: [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
                {
                  &quot;ipProtocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a firewall rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
                  &quot;ports&quot;: [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: [&quot;22&quot;], [&quot;80&quot;,&quot;443&quot;], and [&quot;12345-12349&quot;]. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;srcIpRanges&quot;: [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of src_ip_ranges allowed is 10.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
            &quot;expr&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr(&#x27;sourceiplist-*&#x27;)` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies.
              &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
              &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
              &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
              &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
            },
            &quot;exprOptions&quot;: { # The configuration options available when specifying a user defined CEVAL expression (i.e., &#x27;expr&#x27;).
              &quot;recaptchaOptions&quot;: { # reCAPTCHA configuration options to be applied for the rule. If the rule does not evaluate reCAPTCHA tokens, this field has no effect.
                &quot;actionTokenSiteKeys&quot;: [ # A list of site keys to be used during the validation of reCAPTCHA action-tokens. The provided site keys need to be created from reCAPTCHA API under the same project where the security policy is created.
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
                &quot;sessionTokenSiteKeys&quot;: [ # A list of site keys to be used during the validation of reCAPTCHA session-tokens. The provided site keys need to be created from reCAPTCHA API under the same project where the security policy is created.
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
              },
            },
            &quot;versionedExpr&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Preconfigured versioned expression. If this field is specified, config must also be specified. Available preconfigured expressions along with their requirements are: SRC_IPS_V1 - must specify the corresponding src_ip_range field in config.
          },
          &quot;networkMatch&quot;: { # Represents a match condition that incoming network traffic is evaluated against. # A match condition that incoming packets are evaluated against for CLOUD_ARMOR_NETWORK security policies. If it matches, the corresponding &#x27;action&#x27; is enforced. The match criteria for a rule consists of built-in match fields (like &#x27;srcIpRanges&#x27;) and potentially multiple user-defined match fields (&#x27;userDefinedFields&#x27;). Field values may be extracted directly from the packet or derived from it (e.g. &#x27;srcRegionCodes&#x27;). Some fields may not be present in every packet (e.g. &#x27;srcPorts&#x27;). A user-defined field is only present if the base header is found in the packet and the entire field is in bounds. Each match field may specify which values can match it, listing one or more ranges, prefixes, or exact values that are considered a match for the field. A field value must be present in order to match a specified match field. If no match values are specified for a match field, then any field value is considered to match it, and it&#x27;s not required to be present. For strings specifying &#x27;*&#x27; is also equivalent to match all. For a packet to match a rule, all specified match fields must match the corresponding field values derived from the packet. Example: networkMatch: srcIpRanges: - &quot;192.0.2.0/24&quot; - &quot;198.51.100.0/24&quot; userDefinedFields: - name: &quot;ipv4_fragment_offset&quot; values: - &quot;1-0x1fff&quot; The above match condition matches packets with a source IP in 192.0.2.0/24 or 198.51.100.0/24 and a user-defined field named &quot;ipv4_fragment_offset&quot; with a value between 1 and 0x1fff inclusive.
            &quot;destIpRanges&quot;: [ # Destination IPv4/IPv6 addresses or CIDR prefixes, in standard text format.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;destPorts&quot;: [ # Destination port numbers for TCP/UDP/SCTP. Each element can be a 16-bit unsigned decimal number (e.g. &quot;80&quot;) or range (e.g. &quot;0-1023&quot;).
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;ipProtocols&quot;: [ # IPv4 protocol / IPv6 next header (after extension headers). Each element can be an 8-bit unsigned decimal number (e.g. &quot;6&quot;), range (e.g. &quot;253-254&quot;), or one of the following protocol names: &quot;tcp&quot;, &quot;udp&quot;, &quot;icmp&quot;, &quot;esp&quot;, &quot;ah&quot;, &quot;ipip&quot;, or &quot;sctp&quot;.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;srcAsns&quot;: [ # BGP Autonomous System Number associated with the source IP address.
              42,
            ],
            &quot;srcIpRanges&quot;: [ # Source IPv4/IPv6 addresses or CIDR prefixes, in standard text format.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;srcPorts&quot;: [ # Source port numbers for TCP/UDP/SCTP. Each element can be a 16-bit unsigned decimal number (e.g. &quot;80&quot;) or range (e.g. &quot;0-1023&quot;).
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;srcRegionCodes&quot;: [ # Two-letter ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 country code associated with the source IP address.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;userDefinedFields&quot;: [ # User-defined fields. Each element names a defined field and lists the matching values for that field.
              {
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the user-defined field, as given in the definition.
                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Matching values of the field. Each element can be a 32-bit unsigned decimal or hexadecimal (starting with &quot;0x&quot;) number (e.g. &quot;64&quot;) or range (e.g. &quot;0x400-0x7ff&quot;).
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
              },
            ],
          },
          &quot;preconfiguredWafConfig&quot;: { # Preconfigured WAF configuration to be applied for the rule. If the rule does not evaluate preconfigured WAF rules, i.e., if evaluatePreconfiguredWaf() is not used, this field will have no effect.
            &quot;exclusions&quot;: [ # A list of exclusions to apply during preconfigured WAF evaluation.
              {
                &quot;requestCookiesToExclude&quot;: [ # A list of request cookie names whose value will be excluded from inspection during preconfigured WAF evaluation.
                  {
                    &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The match operator for the field.
                    &quot;val&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the field.
                  },
                ],
                &quot;requestHeadersToExclude&quot;: [ # A list of request header names whose value will be excluded from inspection during preconfigured WAF evaluation.
                  {
                    &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The match operator for the field.
                    &quot;val&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the field.
                  },
                ],
                &quot;requestQueryParamsToExclude&quot;: [ # A list of request query parameter names whose value will be excluded from inspection during preconfigured WAF evaluation. Note that the parameter can be in the query string or in the POST body.
                  {
                    &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The match operator for the field.
                    &quot;val&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the field.
                  },
                ],
                &quot;requestUrisToExclude&quot;: [ # A list of request URIs from the request line to be excluded from inspection during preconfigured WAF evaluation. When specifying this field, the query or fragment part should be excluded.
                  {
                    &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The match operator for the field.
                    &quot;val&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the field.
                  },
                ],
                &quot;targetRuleIds&quot;: [ # A list of target rule IDs under the WAF rule set to apply the preconfigured WAF exclusion. If omitted, it refers to all the rule IDs under the WAF rule set.
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
                &quot;targetRuleSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Target WAF rule set to apply the preconfigured WAF exclusion.
              },
            ],
          },
          &quot;preview&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, the specified action is not enforced.
          &quot;priority&quot;: 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 0 and 2147483647. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 0 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
          &quot;rateLimitOptions&quot;: { # Must be specified if the action is &quot;rate_based_ban&quot; or &quot;throttle&quot; or &quot;fairshare&quot;. Cannot be specified for any other actions.
            &quot;banDurationSec&quot;: 42, # Can only be specified if the action for the rule is &quot;rate_based_ban&quot;. If specified, determines the time (in seconds) the traffic will continue to be banned by the rate limit after the rate falls below the threshold.
            &quot;banThreshold&quot;: { # Can only be specified if the action for the rule is &quot;rate_based_ban&quot;. If specified, the key will be banned for the configured &#x27;ban_duration_sec&#x27; when the number of requests that exceed the &#x27;rate_limit_threshold&#x27; also exceed this &#x27;ban_threshold&#x27;.
              &quot;count&quot;: 42, # Number of HTTP(S) requests for calculating the threshold.
              &quot;intervalSec&quot;: 42, # Interval over which the threshold is computed.
            },
            &quot;conformAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Action to take for requests that are under the configured rate limit threshold. Valid option is &quot;allow&quot; only.
            &quot;enforceOnKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Determines the key to enforce the rate_limit_threshold on. Possible values are: - ALL: A single rate limit threshold is applied to all the requests matching this rule. This is the default value if &quot;enforceOnKey&quot; is not configured. - IP: The source IP address of the request is the key. Each IP has this limit enforced separately. - HTTP_HEADER: The value of the HTTP header whose name is configured under &quot;enforceOnKeyName&quot;. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes of the header value. If no such header is present in the request, the key type defaults to ALL. - XFF_IP: The first IP address (i.e. the originating client IP address) specified in the list of IPs under X-Forwarded-For HTTP header. If no such header is present or the value is not a valid IP, the key defaults to the source IP address of the request i.e. key type IP. - HTTP_COOKIE: The value of the HTTP cookie whose name is configured under &quot;enforceOnKeyName&quot;. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes of the cookie value. If no such cookie is present in the request, the key type defaults to ALL. - HTTP_PATH: The URL path of the HTTP request. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes. - SNI: Server name indication in the TLS session of the HTTPS request. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes. The key type defaults to ALL on a HTTP session. - REGION_CODE: The country/region from which the request originates. - TLS_JA3_FINGERPRINT: JA3 TLS/SSL fingerprint if the client connects using HTTPS, HTTP/2 or HTTP/3. If not available, the key type defaults to ALL. - USER_IP: The IP address of the originating client, which is resolved based on &quot;userIpRequestHeaders&quot; configured with the security policy. If there is no &quot;userIpRequestHeaders&quot; configuration or an IP address cannot be resolved from it, the key type defaults to IP. - TLS_JA4_FINGERPRINT: JA4 TLS/SSL fingerprint if the client connects using HTTPS, HTTP/2 or HTTP/3. If not available, the key type defaults to ALL. For &quot;fairshare&quot; action, this value is limited to ALL i.e. a single rate limit threshold is enforced for all the requests matching the rule.
            &quot;enforceOnKeyConfigs&quot;: [ # If specified, any combination of values of enforce_on_key_type/enforce_on_key_name is treated as the key on which ratelimit threshold/action is enforced. You can specify up to 3 enforce_on_key_configs. If enforce_on_key_configs is specified, enforce_on_key must not be specified.
              {
                &quot;enforceOnKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rate limit key name applicable only for the following key types: HTTP_HEADER -- Name of the HTTP header whose value is taken as the key value. HTTP_COOKIE -- Name of the HTTP cookie whose value is taken as the key value.
                &quot;enforceOnKeyType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Determines the key to enforce the rate_limit_threshold on. Possible values are: - ALL: A single rate limit threshold is applied to all the requests matching this rule. This is the default value if &quot;enforceOnKeyConfigs&quot; is not configured. - IP: The source IP address of the request is the key. Each IP has this limit enforced separately. - HTTP_HEADER: The value of the HTTP header whose name is configured under &quot;enforceOnKeyName&quot;. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes of the header value. If no such header is present in the request, the key type defaults to ALL. - XFF_IP: The first IP address (i.e. the originating client IP address) specified in the list of IPs under X-Forwarded-For HTTP header. If no such header is present or the value is not a valid IP, the key defaults to the source IP address of the request i.e. key type IP. - HTTP_COOKIE: The value of the HTTP cookie whose name is configured under &quot;enforceOnKeyName&quot;. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes of the cookie value. If no such cookie is present in the request, the key type defaults to ALL. - HTTP_PATH: The URL path of the HTTP request. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes. - SNI: Server name indication in the TLS session of the HTTPS request. The key value is truncated to the first 128 bytes. The key type defaults to ALL on a HTTP session. - REGION_CODE: The country/region from which the request originates. - TLS_JA3_FINGERPRINT: JA3 TLS/SSL fingerprint if the client connects using HTTPS, HTTP/2 or HTTP/3. If not available, the key type defaults to ALL. - USER_IP: The IP address of the originating client, which is resolved based on &quot;userIpRequestHeaders&quot; configured with the security policy. If there is no &quot;userIpRequestHeaders&quot; configuration or an IP address cannot be resolved from it, the key type defaults to IP. - TLS_JA4_FINGERPRINT: JA4 TLS/SSL fingerprint if the client connects using HTTPS, HTTP/2 or HTTP/3. If not available, the key type defaults to ALL.
              },
            ],
            &quot;enforceOnKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rate limit key name applicable only for the following key types: HTTP_HEADER -- Name of the HTTP header whose value is taken as the key value. HTTP_COOKIE -- Name of the HTTP cookie whose value is taken as the key value.
            &quot;exceedAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Action to take for requests that are above the configured rate limit threshold, to either deny with a specified HTTP response code, or redirect to a different endpoint. Valid options are `deny(STATUS)`, where valid values for `STATUS` are 403, 404, 429, and 502, and `redirect`, where the redirect parameters come from `exceedRedirectOptions` below. The `redirect` action is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
            &quot;exceedActionRpcStatus&quot;: { # Simplified google.rpc.Status type (omitting details). # Specified gRPC response status for proxyless gRPC requests that are above the configured rate limit threshold
              &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English.
            },
            &quot;exceedRedirectOptions&quot;: { # Parameters defining the redirect action that is used as the exceed action. Cannot be specified if the exceed action is not redirect. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
              &quot;target&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Target for the redirect action. This is required if the type is EXTERNAL_302 and cannot be specified for GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA.
              &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response.
            },
            &quot;rateLimitThreshold&quot;: { # Threshold at which to begin ratelimiting.
              &quot;count&quot;: 42, # Number of HTTP(S) requests for calculating the threshold.
              &quot;intervalSec&quot;: 42, # Interval over which the threshold is computed.
            },
          },
          &quot;redirectOptions&quot;: { # Parameters defining the redirect action. Cannot be specified for any other actions. This field is only supported in Global Security Policies of type CLOUD_ARMOR.
            &quot;target&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Target for the redirect action. This is required if the type is EXTERNAL_302 and cannot be specified for GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA.
            &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response.
          },
          &quot;redirectTarget&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions.
          &quot;ruleManagedProtectionTier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead.
          &quot;ruleNumber&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server.
          &quot;ruleTupleCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule.
          &quot;targetResources&quot;: [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network&#x27;s VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;targetServiceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
        },
      ],
      &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
      &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
      &quot;shortName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # User-provided name of the organization security policy. The name should be unique in the organization in which the security policy is created. This should only be used when SecurityPolicyType is CLOUD_ARMOR. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1035.txt. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
      &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type indicates the intended use of the security policy. - CLOUD_ARMOR: Cloud Armor backend security policies can be configured to filter incoming HTTP requests targeting backend services. They filter requests before they hit the origin servers. - CLOUD_ARMOR_EDGE: Cloud Armor edge security policies can be configured to filter incoming HTTP requests targeting backend services (including Cloud CDN-enabled) as well as backend buckets (Cloud Storage). They filter requests before the request is served from Google&#x27;s cache. - CLOUD_ARMOR_INTERNAL_SERVICE (preview only): Cloud Armor internal service policies can be configured to filter HTTP requests targeting services managed by Traffic Director in a service mesh. They filter requests before the request is served from the application. - CLOUD_ARMOR_NETWORK: Cloud Armor network policies can be configured to filter packets targeting network load balancing resources such as backend services, target pools, target instances, and instances with external IPs. They filter requests before the request is served from the application. This field can be set only at resource creation time.
      &quot;userDefinedFields&quot;: [ # Definitions of user-defined fields for CLOUD_ARMOR_NETWORK policies. A user-defined field consists of up to 4 bytes extracted from a fixed offset in the packet, relative to the IPv4, IPv6, TCP, or UDP header, with an optional mask to select certain bits. Rules may then specify matching values for these fields. Example: userDefinedFields: - name: &quot;ipv4_fragment_offset&quot; base: IPV4 offset: 6 size: 2 mask: &quot;0x1fff&quot;
        {
          &quot;base&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The base relative to which &#x27;offset&#x27; is measured. Possible values are: - IPV4: Points to the beginning of the IPv4 header. - IPV6: Points to the beginning of the IPv6 header. - TCP: Points to the beginning of the TCP header, skipping over any IPv4 options or IPv6 extension headers. Not present for non-first fragments. - UDP: Points to the beginning of the UDP header, skipping over any IPv4 options or IPv6 extension headers. Not present for non-first fragments. required
          &quot;mask&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If specified, apply this mask (bitwise AND) to the field to ignore bits before matching. Encoded as a hexadecimal number (starting with &quot;0x&quot;). The last byte of the field (in network byte order) corresponds to the least significant byte of the mask.
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of this field. Must be unique within the policy.
          &quot;offset&quot;: 42, # Offset of the first byte of the field (in network byte order) relative to &#x27;base&#x27;.
          &quot;size&quot;: 42, # Size of the field in bytes. Valid values: 1-4.
        },
      ],
    },
  ],
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="getHealth">getHealth(project, backendService, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Gets the most recent health check results for this BackendService. Example request body: { &quot;group&quot;: &quot;/zones/us-east1-b/instanceGroups/lb-backend-example&quot; }

Args:
  project: string, A parameter (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to which the queried instance belongs. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{
  &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A URI referencing one of the instance groups or network endpoint groups listed in the backend service.
}

  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    {
  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Metadata defined as annotations on the network endpoint group.
    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
  },
  &quot;healthStatus&quot;: [ # Health state of the backend instances or endpoints in requested instance or network endpoint group, determined based on configured health checks.
    {
      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Metadata defined as annotations for network endpoint.
        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      },
      &quot;forwardingRule&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL of the forwarding rule associated with the health status of the instance.
      &quot;forwardingRuleIp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A forwarding rule IP address assigned to this instance.
      &quot;healthState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Health state of the IPv4 address of the instance.
      &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL of the instance resource.
      &quot;ipAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For target pool based Network Load Balancing, it indicates the forwarding rule&#x27;s IP address assigned to this instance. For other types of load balancing, the field indicates VM internal ip.
      &quot;ipv6Address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      &quot;ipv6HealthState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Health state of the IPv6 address of the instance.
      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # The named port of the instance group, not necessarily the port that is health-checked.
      &quot;weight&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      &quot;weightError&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  ],
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendServiceGroupHealth&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendServiceGroupHealth for the health of backend services.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
  optionsRequestedPolicyVersion: integer, Requested IAM Policy version.
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** ``` { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } ``` **YAML example:** ``` bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 ``` For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
  &quot;auditConfigs&quot;: [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { &quot;audit_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;allServices&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;ADMIN_READ&quot; } ] }, { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;sampleservice.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:aliya@example.com&quot; ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
      &quot;auditLogConfigs&quot;: [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; } ] } This enables &#x27;DATA_READ&#x27; and &#x27;DATA_WRITE&#x27; logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
          &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;logType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The log type that this config enables.
        },
      ],
      &quot;service&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
    },
  ],
  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
      },
      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
    },
  ],
  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="insert">insert(project, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Creates a BackendService resource in the specified project using the data included in the request. For more information, see Backend services overview .

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{ # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
  &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
  &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
    { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
      &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
      &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
      &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
        { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
          &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
          &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        },
      ],
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
      &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
      &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
      &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
      &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  ],
  &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
    &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
      { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
        &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
      },
    ],
    &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
      &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
      &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
    &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
    &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
    &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
      { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
        &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
        &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
      },
    ],
    &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
    &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
    &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
    &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
    &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
    &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  },
  &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
  &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
  },
  &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
    &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
  },
  &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
      &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
      &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
        &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
        &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
      },
    },
    &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
    &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
  },
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
    { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
      &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    },
  ],
  &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
  &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
    &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
    },
  },
  &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
  &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
    &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
    &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
  },
  &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
  &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
    &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
      &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
      &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
        &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
    &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
    &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
      &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
      &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
      &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
    },
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
  },
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
  &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
  &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
    { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
      &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
        &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
      },
      &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
      },
    },
  ],
  &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
    &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
    &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
    &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
  },
  &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
    &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
  },
  &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
  },
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
  &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
  &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
      &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
      &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
    },
  },
  &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
    &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
    &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
    &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
  },
  &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
    &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
      &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  },
  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
  &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
  &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
  &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
    &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
      &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
          &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
            &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
            &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
            &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
              { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
              },
            ],
            &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
          &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
            &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
      &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
    },
    &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
      &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
        {
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
          &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
              &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                  &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                  &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
          &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
              &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
              &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
      ],
    },
    &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
      &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
      &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
      &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
      &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
    },
    &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
    &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
      &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
      &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
      &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
      &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
  &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
    &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
    &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
  },
  &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
  },
  &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
  &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
    &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
    &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
    &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
      { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
        &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
        &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
    {
      &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
    },
  ],
  &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
}

  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="list">list(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Retrieves the list of BackendService resources available to the specified project.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `&gt;`, `&lt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) OR (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Broadwell&quot;) AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq &#x27;single quoted literal&#x27;` `fieldname eq &quot;double quoted literal&quot;` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne &quot;literal&quot;)` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name &quot;instance&quot;, you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=&quot;creationTimestamp desc&quot;`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Contains a list of BackendService resources.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
  &quot;items&quot;: [ # A list of BackendService resources.
    { # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
      &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
      &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
        { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
          &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
          &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
          &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
            { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
              &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
              &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
            },
          ],
          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
          &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
          &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
          &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
          &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
          &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
          &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
          &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
          &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        },
      ],
      &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
        &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
          { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
            &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
          },
        ],
        &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
          &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
          &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
          &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
          &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
        },
        &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
        &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
        &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
        &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
        &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
        &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
          { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
            &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
            &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
          },
        ],
        &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
        &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
        &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
        &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
      },
      &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
        &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
        &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
        &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      },
      &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
      &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
      },
      &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
        &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
        &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
        &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
      },
      &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
          &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
          &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
            &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
            &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
          },
        },
        &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
        &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
      },
      &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
      &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
        { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
          &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        },
      ],
      &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
        &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
          &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
        },
      },
      &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
      &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
      &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
      &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
      &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
        &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
        &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
      },
      &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
      &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
        &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
        &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
          &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
          &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
            &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
          },
        },
      },
      &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
        &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
        &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
        &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
          &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
          &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
          &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
        },
        &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
        &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
      },
      &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
      &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
      &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
      &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
        { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
          &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
            &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
            &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
          },
          &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
            &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
      &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
        &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
        &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
        &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
        &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
        &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
      },
      &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
        &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
      },
      &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      },
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
      &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
      &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
          &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
          &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
        },
      },
      &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
        &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
        &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
        &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
        &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
        &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
        &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
        &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
        &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
        &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
        &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
      },
      &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
        &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        },
      },
      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
      &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
      &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
      &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
      &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
      &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
        &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
          &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
            { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
              &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
                &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
                &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
                &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
                &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
                  { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                    &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
                  },
                ],
                &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
              },
            },
          ],
          &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
            { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
              &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
                &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
              },
            },
          ],
          &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
          &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
            &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
              &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
                &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
              },
              &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
            },
            &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
              &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
              &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
          &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
            {
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
              &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
                { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
                  &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                    { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                      &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                      &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                    },
                  ],
                  &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
                { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
                  &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
                  &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
                  },
                  &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
        &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
          &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
          &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
          &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
          &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
        },
        &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
        &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
          &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
            &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
              &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
                &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
              },
              &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
            },
            &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
              &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
              &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
            },
          },
          &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
          &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
          &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
        },
        &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
      },
      &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
      &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
      &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
      &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
      &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
        &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
        &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
      },
      &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
      },
      &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
      &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
        &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
        &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
        &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
        &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
          { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
            &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
            &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
          },
        ],
      },
      &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
        {
          &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
        },
      ],
      &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
    },
  ],
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendServiceList&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendServiceList for lists of backend services.
  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
  &quot;warning&quot;: { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
    &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
    &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
      {
        &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
        &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
      },
    ],
    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
  },
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="listUsable">listUsable(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Retrieves a list of all usable backend services in the specified project.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `&gt;`, `&lt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) OR (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Broadwell&quot;) AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq &#x27;single quoted literal&#x27;` `fieldname eq &quot;double quoted literal&quot;` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne &quot;literal&quot;)` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name &quot;instance&quot;, you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=&quot;creationTimestamp desc&quot;`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Contains a list of usable BackendService resources.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
  &quot;items&quot;: [ # A list of BackendService resources.
    { # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
      &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
      &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
        { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
          &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
          &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
          &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
            { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
              &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
              &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
            },
          ],
          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
          &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
          &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
          &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
          &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
          &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
          &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
          &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
          &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
          &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        },
      ],
      &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
        &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
          { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
            &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
          },
        ],
        &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
          &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
          &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
          &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
          &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
        },
        &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
        &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
        &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
        &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
        &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
        &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
          { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
            &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
            &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
          },
        ],
        &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
        &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
        &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
        &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
      },
      &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
        &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
        &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
        &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      },
      &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
      &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
      },
      &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
        &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
        &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
        &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
      },
      &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
          &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
          &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
            &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
            &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
          },
        },
        &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
        &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
      },
      &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
      &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
        { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
          &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        },
      ],
      &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
        &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
          &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
        },
      },
      &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
      &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
      &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
      &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
      &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
        &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
        &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
      },
      &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
      &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
        &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
        &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
          &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
          &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
            &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
          },
        },
      },
      &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
        &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
        &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
        &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
          &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
          &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
          &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
        },
        &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
        &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
      },
      &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
      &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
      &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
      &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
        { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
          &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
            &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
            &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
          },
          &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
            &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
      &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
        &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
        &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
        &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
        &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
        &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
      },
      &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
        &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
      },
      &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
      },
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
      &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
      &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
          &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
          &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
        },
      },
      &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
        &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
        &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
        &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
        &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
        &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
        &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
        &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
        &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
        &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
        &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
        &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
      },
      &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
        &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        },
      },
      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
      &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
      &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
      &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
      &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
      &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
        &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
          &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
            { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
              &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
                &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
                &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
                &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
                &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
                  { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                    &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
                  },
                ],
                &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
                  &quot;A String&quot;,
                ],
              },
            },
          ],
          &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
            { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
              &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
                &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
              },
            },
          ],
          &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
          &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
            &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
              &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
                &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
              },
              &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
            },
            &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
              &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
              &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
          &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
            {
              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
              &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
                { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
                  &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                    { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                      &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                      &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                        &quot;A String&quot;,
                      ],
                    },
                  ],
                  &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
                { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
                  &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
                  &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                  &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
                  },
                  &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
        &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
          &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
          &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
          &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
          &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
        },
        &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
        &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
          &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
            &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
              &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
                &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
              },
              &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
            },
            &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
              &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
              &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
                &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
                  &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                      &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                    },
                  },
                  &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                    &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                      &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                      &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                    },
                    &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
                  },
                  &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
                },
              },
              &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
            },
          },
          &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
          &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
          &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
        },
        &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
      },
      &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
      &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
      &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
      &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
      &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
        &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
        &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
          &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
          &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
        },
      },
      &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
        &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
        &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
      },
      &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
      &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
        &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
        &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
        &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
        &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
          { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
            &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
            &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
          },
        ],
      },
      &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
        {
          &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
        },
      ],
      &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
    },
  ],
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#usableBackendServiceList&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#usableBackendServiceList for lists of usable backend services.
  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
  &quot;warning&quot;: { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
    &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
    &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
      {
        &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
        &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
      },
    ],
    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
  },
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="listUsable_next">listUsable_next()</code>
  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.

        Args:
          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)

        Returns:
          A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
        </pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next()</code>
  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.

        Args:
          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)

        Returns:
          A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
        </pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Patches the specified BackendService resource with the data included in the request. For more information, see Backend services overview. This method supports PATCH semantics and uses the JSON merge patch format and processing rules.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to patch. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{ # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
  &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
  &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
    { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
      &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
      &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
      &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
        { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
          &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
          &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        },
      ],
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
      &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
      &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
      &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
      &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  ],
  &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
    &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
      { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
        &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
      },
    ],
    &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
      &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
      &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
    &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
    &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
    &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
      { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
        &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
        &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
      },
    ],
    &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
    &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
    &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
    &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
    &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
    &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  },
  &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
  &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
  },
  &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
    &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
  },
  &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
      &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
      &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
        &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
        &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
      },
    },
    &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
    &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
  },
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
    { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
      &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    },
  ],
  &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
  &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
    &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
    },
  },
  &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
  &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
    &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
    &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
  },
  &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
  &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
    &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
      &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
      &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
        &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
    &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
    &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
      &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
      &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
      &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
    },
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
  },
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
  &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
  &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
    { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
      &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
        &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
      },
      &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
      },
    },
  ],
  &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
    &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
    &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
    &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
  },
  &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
    &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
  },
  &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
  },
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
  &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
  &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
      &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
      &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
    },
  },
  &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
    &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
    &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
    &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
  },
  &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
    &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
      &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  },
  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
  &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
  &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
  &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
    &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
      &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
          &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
            &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
            &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
            &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
              { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
              },
            ],
            &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
          &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
            &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
      &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
    },
    &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
      &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
        {
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
          &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
              &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                  &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                  &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
          &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
              &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
              &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
      ],
    },
    &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
      &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
      &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
      &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
      &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
    },
    &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
    &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
      &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
      &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
      &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
      &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
  &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
    &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
    &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
  },
  &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
  },
  &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
  &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
    &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
    &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
    &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
      { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
        &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
        &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
    {
      &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
    },
  ],
  &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
}

  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="setEdgeSecurityPolicy">setEdgeSecurityPolicy(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Sets the edge security policy for the specified backend service.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to which the edge security policy should be set. The name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{
  &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
}

  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{
  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Flatten Policy to create a backward compatible wire-format. Deprecated. Use &#x27;policy&#x27; to specify bindings.
    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
      },
      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
    },
  ],
  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Flatten Policy to create a backward compatible wire-format. Deprecated. Use &#x27;policy&#x27; to specify the etag.
  &quot;policy&quot;: { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** ``` { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } ``` **YAML example:** ``` bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 ``` For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/). # REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the &#x27;resource&#x27;. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is in general a valid policy but certain services (like Projects) might reject them.
    &quot;auditConfigs&quot;: [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
      { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { &quot;audit_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;allServices&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;ADMIN_READ&quot; } ] }, { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;sampleservice.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:aliya@example.com&quot; ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
        &quot;auditLogConfigs&quot;: [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
          { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; } ] } This enables &#x27;DATA_READ&#x27; and &#x27;DATA_WRITE&#x27; logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
            &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;logType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The log type that this config enables.
          },
        ],
        &quot;service&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
      },
    ],
    &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
      { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
        &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
          &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
          &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
          &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
        },
        &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
          &quot;A String&quot;,
        ],
        &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
      },
    ],
    &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
    &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
  },
}

  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** ``` { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } ``` **YAML example:** ``` bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 ``` For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
  &quot;auditConfigs&quot;: [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { &quot;audit_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;allServices&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;ADMIN_READ&quot; } ] }, { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;sampleservice.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:aliya@example.com&quot; ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
      &quot;auditLogConfigs&quot;: [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; } ] } This enables &#x27;DATA_READ&#x27; and &#x27;DATA_WRITE&#x27; logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
          &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
            &quot;A String&quot;,
          ],
          &quot;logType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The log type that this config enables.
        },
      ],
      &quot;service&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
    },
  ],
  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
      },
      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
    },
  ],
  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="setSecurityPolicy">setSecurityPolicy(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Sets the Google Cloud Armor security policy for the specified backend service. For more information, see Google Cloud Armor Overview

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to which the security policy should be set. The name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{
  &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
}

  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{
  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The set of permissions to check for the &#x27;resource&#x27;. Permissions with wildcards (such as &#x27;*&#x27; or &#x27;storage.*&#x27;) are not allowed.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
}

  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    {
  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
}</pre>
</div>

<div class="method">
    <code class="details" id="update">update(project, backendService, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
  <pre>Updates the specified BackendService resource with the data included in the request. For more information, see Backend services overview.

Args:
  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
  backendService: string, Name of the BackendService resource to update. (required)
  body: object, The request body.
    The object takes the form of:

{ # Represents a Backend Service resource. A backend service defines how Google Cloud load balancers distribute traffic. The backend service configuration contains a set of values, such as the protocol used to connect to backends, various distribution and session settings, health checks, and timeouts. These settings provide fine-grained control over how your load balancer behaves. Most of the settings have default values that allow for easy configuration if you need to get started quickly. Backend services in Google Compute Engine can be either regionally or globally scoped. * [Global](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/backendServices) * [Regional](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionBackendServices) For more information, see Backend Services.
  &quot;affinityCookieTtlSec&quot;: 42, # Lifetime of cookies in seconds. This setting is applicable to Application Load Balancers and Traffic Director and requires GENERATED_COOKIE or HTTP_COOKIE session affinity. If set to 0, the cookie is non-persistent and lasts only until the end of the browser session (or equivalent). The maximum allowed value is two weeks (1,209,600). Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  &quot;allowMultinetwork&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling multi-network mesh. This field is only allowed with load balancing scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
  &quot;backends&quot;: [ # The list of backends that serve this BackendService.
    { # Message containing information of one individual backend.
      &quot;balancingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies how to determine whether the backend of a load balancer can handle additional traffic or is fully loaded. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode. Backends must use compatible balancing modes. For more information, see Supported balancing modes and target capacity settings and Restrictions and guidance for instance groups. Note: Currently, if you use the API to configure incompatible balancing modes, the configuration might be accepted even though it has no impact and is ignored. Specifically, Backend.maxUtilization is ignored when Backend.balancingMode is RATE. In the future, this incompatible combination will be rejected.
      &quot;capacityScaler&quot;: 3.14, # A multiplier applied to the backend&#x27;s target capacity of its balancing mode. The default value is 1, which means the group serves up to 100% of its configured capacity (depending on balancingMode). A setting of 0 means the group is completely drained, offering 0% of its available capacity. The valid ranges are 0.0 and [0.1,1.0]. You cannot configure a setting larger than 0 and smaller than 0.1. You cannot configure a setting of 0 when there is only one backend attached to the backend service. Not available with backends that don&#x27;t support using a balancingMode. This includes backends such as global internet NEGs, regional serverless NEGs, and PSC NEGs.
      &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for CUSTOM_METRICS BalancingMode.
        { # Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.
          &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is collected and reported to Cloud Monitoring, but is not used for load balancing.
          &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target utilization for the Custom Metrics balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0].
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
        },
      ],
      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
      &quot;failover&quot;: True or False, # This field designates whether this is a failover backend. More than one failover backend can be configured for a given BackendService.
      &quot;group&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified URL of an instance group or network endpoint group (NEG) resource. To determine what types of backends a load balancer supports, see the [Backend services overview](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#backends). You must use the *fully-qualified* URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) to specify the instance group or NEG. Partial URLs are not supported. If haPolicy is specified, backends must refer to NEG resources of type GCE_VM_IP.
      &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxConnectionsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a target maximum number of simultaneous connections. For usage guidelines, see Connection balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequests&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for the whole NEG or instance group. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerEndpoint&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single endpoint. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxInFlightRequestsPerInstance&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of in-flight requests for a single VM. Not available if backend&#x27;s balancingMode is RATE or CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRate&quot;: 42, # Defines a maximum number of HTTP requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerEndpoint&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxRatePerInstance&quot;: 3.14, # Defines a maximum target for requests per second (RPS). For usage guidelines, see Rate balancing mode and Utilization balancing mode. Not available if the backend&#x27;s balancingMode is CONNECTION.
      &quot;maxUtilization&quot;: 3.14, # Optional parameter to define a target capacity for the UTILIZATION balancing mode. The valid range is [0.0, 1.0]. For usage guidelines, see Utilization balancing mode.
      &quot;preference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether this backend should be fully utilized before sending traffic to backends with default preference. The possible values are: - PREFERRED: Backends with this preference level will be filled up to their capacity limits first, based on RTT. - DEFAULT: If preferred backends don&#x27;t have enough capacity, backends in this layer would be used and traffic would be assigned based on the load balancing algorithm you use. This is the default
      &quot;trafficDuration&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  ],
  &quot;cdnPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend service. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendService. Only available for specified load balancer types.
    &quot;bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
      { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
        &quot;headerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
      },
    ],
    &quot;cacheKeyPolicy&quot;: { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
      &quot;includeHost&quot;: True or False, # If true, requests to different hosts will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeHttpHeaders&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeNamedCookies&quot;: [ # Allows HTTP cookies (by name) to be used in the cache key. The name=value pair will be used in the cache key Cloud CDN generates.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;includeProtocol&quot;: True or False, # If true, http and https requests will be cached separately.
      &quot;includeQueryString&quot;: True or False, # If true, include query string parameters in the cache key according to query_string_whitelist and query_string_blacklist. If neither is set, the entire query string will be included. If false, the query string will be excluded from the cache key entirely.
      &quot;queryStringBlacklist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to exclude in cache keys. All other parameters will be included. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
      &quot;queryStringWhitelist&quot;: [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. All other parameters will be excluded. Either specify query_string_whitelist or query_string_blacklist, not both. &#x27;&amp;&#x27; and &#x27;=&#x27; will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;cacheMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google&#x27;s edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any &quot;private&quot;, &quot;no-store&quot; or &quot;no-cache&quot; directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
    &quot;clientTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a &quot;public&quot; directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a &quot;public&quot; cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
    &quot;defaultTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;maxTtl&quot;: 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of &quot;0&quot; means &quot;always revalidate&quot;. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
    &quot;negativeCaching&quot;: True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
    &quot;negativeCachingPolicy&quot;: [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN&#x27;s default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
      { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
        &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
        &quot;ttl&quot;: 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
      },
    ],
    &quot;requestCoalescing&quot;: True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
    &quot;serveWhileStale&quot;: 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default &quot;max-stale&quot; duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
    &quot;signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a &quot;Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]&quot; header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
    &quot;signedUrlKeyNames&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;circuitBreakers&quot;: { # Settings controlling the volume of requests, connections and retries to this backend service.
    &quot;connectTimeout&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The timeout for new network connections to hosts.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxConnections&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of connections to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxPendingRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of pending requests allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRequests&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel requests that allowed to the backend service. If not specified, there is no limit.
    &quot;maxRequestsPerConnection&quot;: 42, # Maximum requests for a single connection to the backend service. This parameter is respected by both the HTTP/1.1 and HTTP/2 implementations. If not specified, there is no limit. Setting this parameter to 1 will effectively disable keep alive. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;maxRetries&quot;: 42, # The maximum number of parallel retries allowed to the backend cluster. If not specified, the default is 1. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
  },
  &quot;compressionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client&#x27;s Accept-Encoding header.
  &quot;connectionDraining&quot;: { # Message containing connection draining configuration. # connectionDraining cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;drainingTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Configures a duration timeout for existing requests on a removed backend instance. For supported load balancers and protocols, as described in Enabling connection draining.
  },
  &quot;connectionTrackingPolicy&quot;: { # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. # Connection Tracking configuration for this BackendService. Connection tracking policy settings are only available for external passthrough Network Load Balancers and internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. connectionTrackingPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;connectionPersistenceOnUnhealthyBackends&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies connection persistence when backends are unhealthy. The default value is DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL. If set to DEFAULT_FOR_PROTOCOL, the existing connections persist on unhealthy backends only for connection-oriented protocols (TCP and SCTP) and only if the Tracking Mode is PER_CONNECTION (default tracking mode) or the Session Affinity is configured for 5-tuple. They do not persist for UDP. If set to NEVER_PERSIST, after a backend becomes unhealthy, the existing connections on the unhealthy backend are never persisted on the unhealthy backend. They are always diverted to newly selected healthy backends (unless all backends are unhealthy). If set to ALWAYS_PERSIST, existing connections always persist on unhealthy backends regardless of protocol and session affinity. It is generally not recommended to use this mode overriding the default. For more details, see [Connection Persistence for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#connection-persistence) and [Connection Persistence for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#connection-persistence).
    &quot;enableStrongAffinity&quot;: True or False, # Enable Strong Session Affinity for external passthrough Network Load Balancers. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;idleTimeoutSec&quot;: 42, # Specifies how long to keep a Connection Tracking entry while there is no matching traffic (in seconds). For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers: - The minimum (default) is 10 minutes and the maximum is 16 hours. - It can be set only if Connection Tracking is less than 5-tuple (i.e. Session Affinity is CLIENT_IP_NO_DESTINATION, CLIENT_IP or CLIENT_IP_PROTO, and Tracking Mode is PER_SESSION). For external passthrough Network Load Balancers the default is 60 seconds. This option is not available publicly.
    &quot;trackingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the key used for connection tracking. There are two options: - PER_CONNECTION: This is the default mode. The Connection Tracking is performed as per the Connection Key (default Hash Method) for the specific protocol. - PER_SESSION: The Connection Tracking is performed as per the configured Session Affinity. It matches the configured Session Affinity. For more details, see [Tracking Mode for Network Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-backend-service#tracking-mode) and [Tracking Mode for Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal#tracking-mode).
  },
  &quot;consistentHash&quot;: { # This message defines settings for a consistent hash style load balancer. # Consistent Hash-based load balancing can be used to provide soft session affinity based on HTTP headers, cookies or other properties. This load balancing policy is applicable only for HTTP connections. The affinity to a particular destination host will be lost when one or more hosts are added/removed from the destination service. This field specifies parameters that control consistent hashing. This field is only applicable when localityLbPolicy is set to MAGLEV or RING_HASH. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;httpCookie&quot;: { # The information about the HTTP Cookie on which the hash function is based for load balancing policies that use a consistent hash. # Hash is based on HTTP Cookie. This field describes a HTTP cookie that will be used as the hash key for the consistent hash load balancer. If the cookie is not present, it will be generated. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HTTP_COOKIE. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
      &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
      &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
        &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
        &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
      },
    },
    &quot;httpHeaderName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hash based on the value of the specified header field. This field is applicable if the sessionAffinity is set to HEADER_FIELD.
    &quot;minimumRingSize&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The minimum number of virtual nodes to use for the hash ring. Defaults to 1024. Larger ring sizes result in more granular load distributions. If the number of hosts in the load balancing pool is larger than the ring size, each host will be assigned a single virtual node.
  },
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;customMetrics&quot;: [ # List of custom metrics that are used for the WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
    { # Custom Metrics are used for WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN locality_lb_policy.
      &quot;dryRun&quot;: True or False, # If true, the metric data is not used for load balancing.
      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of a custom utilization signal. The name must be 1-64 characters long and match the regular expression [a-z]([-_.a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])? which means that the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, period, underscore, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash, period, or underscore. For usage guidelines, see Custom Metrics balancing mode. This field can only be used for a global or regional backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    },
  ],
  &quot;customRequestHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied requests. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;customResponseHeaders&quot;: [ # Headers that the load balancer adds to proxied responses. See [Creating custom headers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/custom-headers).
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
  &quot;dynamicForwarding&quot;: { # Defines a dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. # Dynamic forwarding configuration. This field is used to configure the backend service with dynamic forwarding feature which together with Service Extension allows customized and complex routing logic.
    &quot;ipPortSelection&quot;: { # Defines a IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration for the backend service. Some ranges are restricted: Restricted ranges. # IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding configuration.
      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # A boolean flag enabling IP:PORT based dynamic forwarding.
    },
  },
  &quot;edgeSecurityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;enableCDN&quot;: True or False, # If true, enables Cloud CDN for the backend service of a global external Application Load Balancer.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the canary migration state. Possible values are PREPARE, TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE, and TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC. To begin the migration from EXTERNAL to EXTERNAL_MANAGED, the state must be changed to PREPARE. The state must be changed to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC before the loadBalancingScheme can be changed to EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate traffic by percentage using externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage. Rolling back a migration requires the states to be set in reverse order. So changing the scheme from EXTERNAL_MANAGED to EXTERNAL requires the state to be set to TEST_ALL_TRAFFIC at the same time. Optionally, the TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE state can be used to migrate some traffic back to EXTERNAL or PREPARE can be used to migrate all traffic back to EXTERNAL.
  &quot;externalManagedMigrationTestingPercentage&quot;: 3.14, # Determines the fraction of requests that should be processed by the Global external Application Load Balancer. The value of this field must be in the range [0, 100]. Session affinity options will slightly affect this routing behavior, for more details, see: Session Affinity. This value can only be set if the loadBalancingScheme in the BackendService is set to EXTERNAL (when using the classic Application Load Balancer) and the migration state is TEST_BY_PERCENTAGE.
  &quot;failoverPolicy&quot;: { # For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). On failover or failback, this field indicates whether connection draining will be honored. Google Cloud has a fixed connection draining timeout of 10 minutes. A setting of true terminates existing TCP connections to the active pool during failover and failback, immediately draining traffic. A setting of false allows existing TCP connections to persist, even on VMs no longer in the active pool, for up to the duration of the connection draining timeout (10 minutes). # Requires at least one backend instance group to be defined as a backup (failover) backend. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). failoverPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;disableConnectionDrainOnFailover&quot;: True or False, # This can be set to true only if the protocol is TCP. The default is false.
    &quot;dropTrafficIfUnhealthy&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, connections to the load balancer are dropped when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy.If set to false, connections are distributed among all primary VMs when all primary and all backup backend VMs are unhealthy. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external passthrough Network Load Balancers](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview). The default is false.
    &quot;failoverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in the range [0, 1]. If the value is 0, the load balancer performs a failover when the number of healthy primary VMs equals zero. For all other values, the load balancer performs a failover when the total number of healthy primary VMs is less than this ratio. For load balancers that have configurable failover: [Internal TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/internal/failover-overview) and [external TCP/UDP Load Balancing](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/network/networklb-failover-overview).
  },
  &quot;fingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
  &quot;haPolicy&quot;: { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;fastIPMove&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - &gt;GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don&#x27;t send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule&#x27;s virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
    &quot;leader&quot;: { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
      &quot;backendGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader&#x27;s backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader&#x27;s backendGroup is not permitted.
      &quot;networkEndpoint&quot;: { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
        &quot;instance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the VM instance of the leader network endpoint. The instance must already be attached to the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Authorization requires the following IAM permission on the specified resource instance: compute.instances.use
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;healthChecks&quot;: [ # The list of URLs to the healthChecks, httpHealthChecks (legacy), or httpsHealthChecks (legacy) resource for health checking this backend service. Not all backend services support legacy health checks. See Load balancer guide. Currently, at most one health check can be specified for each backend service. Backend services with instance group or zonal NEG backends must have a health check unless haPolicy is specified. Backend services with internet or serverless NEG backends must not have a health check. healthChecks[] cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;iap&quot;: { # Identity-Aware Proxy # The configurations for Identity-Aware Proxy on this resource. Not available for internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers.
    &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the serving infrastructure will authenticate and authorize all incoming requests.
    &quot;oauth2ClientId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client ID to use for the authentication flow.
    &quot;oauth2ClientInfo&quot;: { # [Input Only] OAuth client info required to generate client id to be used for IAP.
      &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to be used in OAuth consent screen.
      &quot;clientName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the client to be generated. Optional - If not provided, the name will be autogenerated by the backend.
      &quot;developerEmailAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Developer&#x27;s information to be used in OAuth consent screen.
    },
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecret&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # OAuth2 client secret to use for the authentication flow. For security reasons, this value cannot be retrieved via the API. Instead, the SHA-256 hash of the value is returned in the oauth2ClientSecretSha256 field. @InputOnly
    &quot;oauth2ClientSecretSha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] SHA256 hash value for the field oauth2_client_secret above.
  },
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;ipAddressSelectionPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a preference for traffic sent from the proxy to the backend (or from the client to the backend for proxyless gRPC). The possible values are: - IPV4_ONLY: Only send IPv4 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv4 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This is the default setting. - PREFER_IPV6: Prioritize the connection to the endpoint&#x27;s IPv6 address over its IPv4 address (provided there is a healthy IPv6 address). - IPV6_ONLY: Only send IPv6 traffic to the backends of the backend service (Instance Group, Managed Instance Group, Network Endpoint Group), regardless of traffic from the client to the proxy. Only IPv6 health checks are used to check the health of the backends. This field is applicable to either: - Advanced global external Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme EXTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional external Application Load Balancer, - Internal proxy Network Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Regional internal Application Load Balancer (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_MANAGED), - Traffic Director with Envoy proxies and proxyless gRPC (load balancing scheme INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED).
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#backendService&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#backendService for backend services.
  &quot;loadBalancingScheme&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the load balancer type. A backend service created for one type of load balancer cannot be used with another. For more information, refer to Choosing a load balancer.
  &quot;localityLbPolicies&quot;: [ # A list of locality load-balancing policies to be used in order of preference. When you use localityLbPolicies, you must set at least one value for either the localityLbPolicies[].policy or the localityLbPolicies[].customPolicy field. localityLbPolicies overrides any value set in the localityLbPolicy field. For an example of how to use this field, see Define a list of preferred policies. Caution: This field and its children are intended for use in a service mesh that includes gRPC clients only. Envoy proxies can&#x27;t use backend services that have this configuration.
    { # Container for either a built-in LB policy supported by gRPC or Envoy or a custom one implemented by the end user.
      &quot;customPolicy&quot;: { # The configuration for a custom policy implemented by the user and deployed with the client.
        &quot;data&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional, arbitrary JSON object with configuration data, understood by a locally installed custom policy implementation.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the custom policy. The value should match the name of a custom implementation registered on the gRPC clients. It should follow protocol buffer message naming conventions and include the full path (for example, myorg.CustomLbPolicy). The maximum length is 256 characters. Do not specify the same custom policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected. For an example of how to use this field, see Use a custom policy.
      },
      &quot;policy&quot;: { # The configuration for a built-in load balancing policy.
        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of a locality load-balancing policy. Valid values include ROUND_ROBIN and, for Java clients, LEAST_REQUEST. For information about these values, see the description of localityLbPolicy. Do not specify the same policy more than once for a backend. If you do, the configuration is rejected.
      },
    },
  ],
  &quot;localityLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The load balancing algorithm used within the scope of the locality. The possible values are: - ROUND_ROBIN: This is a simple policy in which each healthy backend is selected in round robin order. This is the default. - LEAST_REQUEST: An O(1) algorithm which selects two random healthy hosts and picks the host which has fewer active requests. - RING_HASH: The ring/modulo hash load balancer implements consistent hashing to backends. The algorithm has the property that the addition/removal of a host from a set of N hosts only affects 1/N of the requests. - RANDOM: The load balancer selects a random healthy host. - ORIGINAL_DESTINATION: Backend host is selected based on the client connection metadata, i.e., connections are opened to the same address as the destination address of the incoming connection before the connection was redirected to the load balancer. - MAGLEV: used as a drop in replacement for the ring hash load balancer. Maglev is not as stable as ring hash but has faster table lookup build times and host selection times. For more information about Maglev, see Maglev: A Fast and Reliable Software Network Load Balancer. - WEIGHTED_ROUND_ROBIN: Per-endpoint Weighted Round Robin Load Balancing using weights computed from Backend reported Custom Metrics. If set, the Backend Service responses are expected to contain non-standard HTTP response header field Endpoint-Load-Metrics. The reported metrics to use for computing the weights are specified via the customMetrics field. This field is applicable to either: - A regional backend service with the service_protocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED. - A global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED, or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. If sessionAffinity is not configured—that is, if session affinity remains at the default value of NONE—then the default value for localityLbPolicy is ROUND_ROBIN. If session affinity is set to a value other than NONE, then the default value for localityLbPolicy is MAGLEV. Only ROUND_ROBIN and RING_HASH are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. localityLbPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;logConfig&quot;: { # The available logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. # This field denotes the logging options for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. If logging is enabled, logs will be exported to Stackdriver.
    &quot;enable&quot;: True or False, # Denotes whether to enable logging for the load balancer traffic served by this backend service. The default value is false.
    &quot;optional&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated in favor of optionalMode. This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;optionalFields&quot;: [ # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service and &quot;logConfig.optionalMode&quot; was set to CUSTOM. Contains a list of optional fields you want to include in the logs. For example: serverInstance, serverGkeDetails.cluster, serverGkeDetails.pod.podNamespace
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
    &quot;optionalMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. Configures whether all, none or a subset of optional fields should be added to the reported logs. One of [INCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL, CUSTOM]. Default is EXCLUDE_ALL_OPTIONAL.
    &quot;sampleRate&quot;: 3.14, # This field can only be specified if logging is enabled for this backend service. The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. This configures the sampling rate of requests to the load balancer where 1.0 means all logged requests are reported and 0.0 means no logged requests are reported. The default value is 1.0.
  },
  &quot;maxStreamDuration&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the default maximum duration (timeout) for streams to this service. Duration is computed from the beginning of the stream until the response has been completely processed, including all retries. A stream that does not complete in this duration is closed. If not specified, there will be no timeout limit, i.e. the maximum duration is infinite. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. This field is only allowed when the loadBalancingScheme of the backend service is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
    &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
  },
  &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Deployment metadata associated with the resource to be set by a GKE hub controller and read by the backend RCTH
    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
  },
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
  &quot;network&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the network to which this backend service belongs. This field must be set for Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy is enabled, and for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers when the haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled. This field can only be specified when the load balancing scheme is set to INTERNAL, or when the load balancing scheme is set to EXTERNAL and haPolicy fastIpMove is enabled.
  &quot;networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy&quot;: { # Configures traffic steering properties of internal passthrough Network Load Balancers. networkPassThroughLbTrafficPolicy cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;zonalAffinity&quot;: { # When configured, new connections are load balanced across healthy backend endpoints in the local zone.
      &quot;spillover&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This field indicates whether zonal affinity is enabled or not. The possible values are: - ZONAL_AFFINITY_DISABLED: Default Value. Zonal Affinity is disabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_STAY_WITHIN_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there are no healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all backend endpoints in the local zone. - ZONAL_AFFINITY_SPILL_CROSS_ZONE: Zonal Affinity is enabled. The load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints in the local zone only. If there aren&#x27;t enough healthy backend endpoints in the local zone, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy backend endpoints across all zones.
      &quot;spilloverRatio&quot;: 3.14, # The value of the field must be in [0, 1]. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is equal to or above this threshold, the load balancer distributes new connections to all healthy endpoints in the local zone only. When the ratio of the count of healthy backend endpoints in a zone to the count of backend endpoints in that same zone is below this threshold, the load balancer distributes all new connections to all healthy endpoints across all zones.
    },
  },
  &quot;outlierDetection&quot;: { # Settings controlling the eviction of unhealthy hosts from the load balancing pool for the backend service. # Settings controlling the ejection of unhealthy backend endpoints from the load balancing pool of each individual proxy instance that processes the traffic for the given backend service. If not set, this feature is considered disabled. Results of the outlier detection algorithm (ejection of endpoints from the load balancing pool and returning them back to the pool) are executed independently by each proxy instance of the load balancer. In most cases, more than one proxy instance handles the traffic received by a backend service. Thus, it is possible that an unhealthy endpoint is detected and ejected by only some of the proxies, and while this happens, other proxies may continue to send requests to the same unhealthy endpoint until they detect and eject the unhealthy endpoint. Applicable backend endpoints can be: - VM instances in an Instance Group - Endpoints in a Zonal NEG (GCE_VM_IP, GCE_VM_IP_PORT) - Endpoints in a Hybrid Connectivity NEG (NON_GCP_PRIVATE_IP_PORT) - Serverless NEGs, that resolve to Cloud Run, App Engine, or Cloud Functions Services - Private Service Connect NEGs, that resolve to Google-managed regional API endpoints or managed services published using Private Service Connect Applicable backend service types can be: - A global backend service with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. - A regional backend service with the serviceProtocol set to HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2 or H2C, and loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_MANAGED or EXTERNAL_MANAGED. Not supported for Serverless NEGs. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true.
    &quot;baseEjectionTime&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # The base time that a backend endpoint is ejected for. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s. After a backend endpoint is returned back to the load balancing pool, it can be ejected again in another ejection analysis. Thus, the total ejection time is equal to the base ejection time multiplied by the number of times the backend endpoint has been ejected. Defaults to 30000ms or 30s.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;consecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # Number of consecutive errors before a backend endpoint is ejected from the load balancing pool. When the backend endpoint is accessed over HTTP, a 5xx return code qualifies as an error. Defaults to 5.
    &quot;consecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The number of consecutive gateway failures (502, 503, 504 status or connection errors that are mapped to one of those status codes) before a consecutive gateway failure ejection occurs. Defaults to 3.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveErrors&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive 5xx. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 0.
    &quot;enforcingConsecutiveGatewayFailure&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through consecutive gateway failures. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100.
    &quot;enforcingSuccessRate&quot;: 42, # The percentage chance that a backend endpoint will be ejected when an outlier status is detected through success rate statistics. This setting can be used to disable ejection or to ramp it up slowly. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;interval&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Time interval between ejection analysis sweeps. This can result in both new ejections and backend endpoints being returned to service. The interval is equal to the number of seconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.seconds plus the number of nanoseconds as defined in outlierDetection.interval.nanos. Defaults to 1 second.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
    &quot;maxEjectionPercent&quot;: 42, # Maximum percentage of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool for the backend service that can be ejected if the ejection conditions are met. Defaults to 50%.
    &quot;successRateMinimumHosts&quot;: 42, # The number of backend endpoints in the load balancing pool that must have enough request volume to detect success rate outliers. If the number of backend endpoints is fewer than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for any backend endpoint in the load balancing pool. Defaults to 5. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateRequestVolume&quot;: 42, # The minimum number of total requests that must be collected in one interval (as defined by the interval duration above) to include this backend endpoint in success rate based outlier detection. If the volume is lower than this setting, outlier detection via success rate statistics is not performed for that backend endpoint. Defaults to 100. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
    &quot;successRateStdevFactor&quot;: 42, # This factor is used to determine the ejection threshold for success rate outlier ejection. The ejection threshold is the difference between the mean success rate, and the product of this factor and the standard deviation of the mean success rate: mean - (stdev * successRateStdevFactor). This factor is divided by a thousand to get a double. That is, if the desired factor is 1.9, the runtime value should be 1900. Defaults to 1900. Not supported when the backend service uses Serverless NEG.
  },
  &quot;params&quot;: { # Additional Backend Service parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
    &quot;resourceManagerTags&quot;: { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {&quot;tagKeys/333&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;, &quot;tagKeys/123&quot; : &quot;tagValues/456&quot;} * {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;production&quot;, &quot;345/abc&quot; : &quot;xyz&quot;} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID &amp; namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {&quot;123/environment&quot; : &quot;tagValues/444&quot;} is invalid.
      &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    },
  },
  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Deprecated in favor of portName. The TCP port to connect on the backend. The default value is 80. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port.
  &quot;portName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A named port on a backend instance group representing the port for communication to the backend VMs in that group. The named port must be [defined on each backend instance group](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#named_ports). This parameter has no meaning if the backends are NEGs. For internal passthrough Network Load Balancers and external passthrough Network Load Balancers, omit port_name.
  &quot;protocol&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The protocol this BackendService uses to communicate with backends. Possible values are HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP2, H2C, TCP, SSL, UDP or GRPC. depending on the chosen load balancer or Traffic Director configuration. Refer to the documentation for the load balancers or for Traffic Director for more information. Must be set to GRPC when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend service resides. This field is not applicable to global backend services. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
  &quot;securityPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The resource URL for the security policy associated with this backend service.
  &quot;securitySettings&quot;: { # The authentication and authorization settings for a BackendService. # This field specifies the security settings that apply to this backend service. This field is applicable to a global backend service with the load_balancing_scheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED.
    &quot;authentication&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] Use clientTlsPolicy instead.
    &quot;authenticationPolicy&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The authentication settings for the backend service. The authentication settings for the backend service. # [Deprecated] Authentication policy defines what authentication methods can be accepted on backends, and if authenticated, which method/certificate will set the request principal. request principal.
      &quot;origins&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for origin authentication. Similar to peers, these will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set origin identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if origin authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the origin authentication method. Configuration for the origin authentication method.
          &quot;jwt&quot;: { # [Deprecated] JWT configuration for origin authentication. JWT configuration for origin authentication.
            &quot;audiences&quot;: [ # A JWT containing any of these audiences will be accepted. The service name will be accepted if audiences is empty. Examples: bookstore_android.apps.googleusercontent.com, bookstore_web.apps.googleusercontent.com
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
            &quot;issuer&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies the issuer that issued the JWT, which is usually a URL or an email address. Examples: https://securetoken.google.com, 1234567-compute@developer.gserviceaccount.com
            &quot;jwksPublicKeys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The provider&#x27;s public key set to validate the signature of the JWT.
            &quot;jwtHeaders&quot;: [ # jwt_headers and jwt_params define where to extract the JWT from an HTTP request. If no explicit location is specified, the following default locations are tried in order: 1. The Authorization header using the Bearer schema. See `here `_. Example: Authorization: Bearer . 2. `access_token` query parameter. See `this `_ Multiple JWTs can be verified for a request. Each JWT has to be extracted from the locations its issuer specified or from the default locations. This field is set if JWT is sent in a request header. This field specifies the header name. For example, if `header=x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion`, the header format will be x-goog-iap-jwt-assertion: .
              { # [Deprecated] This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token. This message specifies a header location to extract JWT token.
                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The HTTP header name.
                &quot;valuePrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value prefix. The value format is &quot;value_prefix&quot; For example, for &quot;Authorization: Bearer &quot;, value_prefix=&quot;Bearer &quot; with a space at the end.
              },
            ],
            &quot;jwtParams&quot;: [ # This field is set if JWT is sent in a query parameter. This field specifies the query parameter name. For example, if jwt_params[0] is jwt_token, the JWT format in the query parameter is /path?jwt_token=.
              &quot;A String&quot;,
            ],
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;peers&quot;: [ # List of authentication methods that can be used for peer authentication. They will be evaluated in order the first valid one will be used to set peer identity. If none of these methods pass, the request will be rejected with authentication failed error (401). Leave the list empty if peer authentication is not required.
        { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the peer authentication method. Configuration for the peer authentication method.
          &quot;mtls&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. Configuration for the mutual Tls mode for peer authentication. # Set if mTLS is used for peer authentication.
            &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies if the server TLS is configured to be strict or permissive. This field can be set to one of the following: STRICT: Client certificate must be presented, connection is in TLS. PERMISSIVE: Client certificate can be omitted, connection can be either plaintext or TLS.
          },
        },
      ],
      &quot;principalBinding&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Define whether peer or origin identity should be used for principal. Default value is USE_PEER. If peer (or origin) identity is not available, either because peer/origin authentication is not defined, or failed, principal will be left unset. In other words, binding rule does not affect the decision to accept or reject request. This field can be set to one of the following: USE_PEER: Principal will be set to the identity from peer authentication. USE_ORIGIN: Principal will be set to the identity from origin authentication.
      &quot;serverTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain server-side security certificates and identity information.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
    },
    &quot;authorizationConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Authorization configuration provides service-level and method-level access control for a service. control for a service. # [Deprecated] Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config. Authorization config defines the Role Based Access Control (RBAC) config.
      &quot;policies&quot;: [ # List of RbacPolicies.
        {
          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the RbacPolicy.
          &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The list of permissions.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a permission are ANDed.
              &quot;constraints&quot;: [ # Extra custom constraints. The constraints are ANDed together.
                { # Custom constraint that specifies a key and a list of allowed values for Istio attributes.
                  &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key of the constraint.
                  &quot;values&quot;: [ # A list of allowed values.
                    &quot;A String&quot;,
                  ],
                },
              ],
              &quot;hosts&quot;: [ # Used in Ingress or Egress Gateway cases to specify hosts that the policy applies to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;methods&quot;: [ # HTTP method.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notHosts&quot;: [ # Negate of hosts. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notMethods&quot;: [ # Negate of methods. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPaths&quot;: [ # Negate of paths. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notPorts&quot;: [ # Negate of ports. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;paths&quot;: [ # HTTP request paths or gRPC methods. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ports&quot;: [ # Port names or numbers.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
          &quot;principals&quot;: [ # The list of principals.
            { # [Deprecated] All fields defined in a principal are ANDed.
              &quot;condition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression to specify custom condition.
              &quot;groups&quot;: [ # The groups the principal belongs to. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;ips&quot;: [ # IPv4 or IPv6 address or range (In CIDR format)
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The namespaces. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notGroups&quot;: [ # Negate of groups. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notIps&quot;: [ # Negate of IPs. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notNamespaces&quot;: [ # Negate of namespaces. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;notUsers&quot;: [ # Negate of users. Specifies exclusions.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
              &quot;properties&quot;: { # A map of Istio attribute to expected values. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported for values. For example, `request.headers[version]: &quot;v1&quot;`. The properties are ANDed together.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;users&quot;: [ # The user names/IDs or service accounts. Exact match, prefix match, and suffix match are supported.
                &quot;A String&quot;,
              ],
            },
          ],
        },
      ],
    },
    &quot;awsV4Authentication&quot;: { # Contains the configurations necessary to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support Signature Version 4 for authentication. The service name for generating the authentication header will always default to &#x27;s3&#x27;. # The configuration needed to generate a signature for access to private storage buckets that support AWS&#x27;s Signature Version 4 for authentication. Allowed only for INTERNET_IP_PORT and INTERNET_FQDN_PORT NEG backends.
      &quot;accessKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The access key used for s3 bucket authentication. Required for updating or creating a backend that uses AWS v4 signature authentication, but will not be returned as part of the configuration when queried with a REST API GET request. @InputOnly
      &quot;accessKeyId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The identifier of an access key used for s3 bucket authentication.
      &quot;accessKeyVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The optional version identifier for the access key. You can use this to keep track of different iterations of your access key.
      &quot;originRegion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the cloud region of your origin. This is a free-form field with the name of the region your cloud uses to host your origin. For example, &quot;us-east-1&quot; for AWS or &quot;us-ashburn-1&quot; for OCI.
    },
    &quot;clientTlsPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. A URL referring to a networksecurity.ClientTlsPolicy resource that describes how clients should authenticate with this service&#x27;s backends. clientTlsPolicy only applies to a global BackendService with the loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If left blank, communications are not encrypted.
    &quot;clientTlsSettings&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The client side authentication settings for connection originating from the backend service. the backend service. # [Deprecated] TLS Settings for the backend service.
      &quot;clientTlsContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The TLS settings for the client or server. The TLS settings for the client or server. # Configures the mechanism to obtain client-side security certificates and identity information. This field is only applicable when mode is set to MUTUAL.
        &quot;certificateContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the client or server certificate.
          &quot;certificatePaths&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # Specifies the certificate and private key paths. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_PATH.
            &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
            &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
          },
          &quot;certificateSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
        },
        &quot;validationContext&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. validate the client/server certificate. # Defines the mechanism to obtain the Certificate Authority certificate to validate the client/server certificate. If omitted, the proxy will not validate the server or client certificate.
          &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the CA certificate to validate the client or server certificate.
          &quot;sdsConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The configuration to access the SDS server. The configuration to access the SDS server. # Specifies the config to retrieve certificates through SDS. This field is applicable only if tlsCertificateSource is set to USE_SDS.
            &quot;grpcServiceConfig&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC config to access the SDS server. gRPC config to access the SDS server. # The configuration to access the SDS server over GRPC.
              &quot;callCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC call credentials to access the SDS server. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;callCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of call credentials to use for GRPC requests to the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: - GCE_VM: The local GCE VM service account credentials are used to access the SDS server. - FROM_PLUGIN: Custom authenticator credentials are used to access the SDS server.
                &quot;fromPlugin&quot;: { # [Deprecated] Custom authenticator credentials. Custom authenticator credentials. # Custom authenticator credentials. Valid if callCredentialType is FROM_PLUGIN.
                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Plugin name.
                  &quot;structConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A text proto that conforms to a Struct type definition interpreted by the plugin.
                },
              },
              &quot;channelCredentials&quot;: { # [Deprecated] gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. gRPC channel credentials to access the SDS server. # The channel credentials to access the SDS server.
                &quot;certificates&quot;: { # [Deprecated] The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. The paths to the mounted TLS Certificates and private key. # The call credentials to access the SDS server.
                  &quot;certificatePath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server TLS certificate to use.
                  &quot;privateKeyPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path to the file holding the client or server private key.
                },
                &quot;channelCredentialType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The channel credentials to access the SDS server. This field can be set to one of the following: CERTIFICATES: Use TLS certificates to access the SDS server. GCE_VM: Use local GCE VM credentials to access the SDS server.
              },
              &quot;targetUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target URI of the SDS server.
            },
          },
          &quot;validationSource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines how TLS certificates are obtained.
        },
      },
      &quot;mode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates whether connections to this port should be secured using TLS. The value of this field determines how TLS is enforced. This can be set to one of the following values: DISABLE: Do not setup a TLS connection to the backends. SIMPLE: Originate a TLS connection to the backends. MUTUAL: Secure connections to the backends using mutual TLS by presenting client certificates for authentication.
      &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # SNI string to present to the server during TLS handshake. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
      &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of alternate names to verify the subject identity in the certificate.If specified, the proxy will verify that the server certificate&#x27;s subject alt name matches one of the specified values. This field is applicable only when mode is SIMPLE or MUTUAL.
        &quot;A String&quot;,
      ],
    },
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # Optional. A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the client verifies during a mutual TLS handshake with an server/endpoint for this BackendService. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the client, the client inspects the certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field. If the field contains one of the specified values, the communication continues. Otherwise, it fails. This additional check enables the client to verify that the server is authorized to run the requested service. Note that the contents of the server certificate&#x27;s subjectAltName field are configured by the Public Key Infrastructure which provisions server identities. Only applies to a global BackendService with loadBalancingScheme set to INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. Only applies when BackendService has an attached clientTlsPolicy with clientCertificate (mTLS mode).
      &quot;A String&quot;,
    ],
  },
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;serviceBindings&quot;: [ # URLs of networkservices.ServiceBinding resources. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED. If set, lists of backends and health checks must be both empty.
    &quot;A String&quot;,
  ],
  &quot;serviceLbPolicy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL to networkservices.ServiceLbPolicy resource. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is EXTERNAL_MANAGED, INTERNAL_MANAGED or INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED and the scope is global.
  &quot;sessionAffinity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of session affinity to use. The default is NONE. Only NONE and HEADER_FIELD are supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. For more details, see: [Session Affinity](https://cloud.google.com/load-balancing/docs/backend-service#session_affinity). sessionAffinity cannot be specified with haPolicy.
  &quot;strongSessionAffinityCookie&quot;: { # The HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. # Describes the HTTP cookie used for stateful session affinity. This field is applicable and required if the sessionAffinity is set to STRONG_COOKIE_AFFINITY.
    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the cookie.
    &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Path to set for the cookie.
    &quot;ttl&quot;: { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like &quot;day&quot; or &quot;month&quot;. Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Lifetime of the cookie.
      &quot;nanos&quot;: 42, # Span of time that&#x27;s a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
      &quot;seconds&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
    },
  },
  &quot;subsetting&quot;: { # Subsetting configuration for this BackendService. Currently this is applicable only for Internal TCP/UDP load balancing, Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and Traffic Director. # subsetting cannot be specified with haPolicy.
    &quot;policy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
    &quot;subsetSize&quot;: 42, # The number of backends per backend group assigned to each proxy instance or each service mesh client. An input parameter to the `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING` algorithm. Can only be set if `policy` is set to `CONSISTENT_HASH_SUBSETTING`. Can only be set if load balancing scheme is `INTERNAL_MANAGED` or `INTERNAL_SELF_MANAGED`. `subset_size` is optional for Internal HTTP(S) load balancing and required for Traffic Director. If you do not provide this value, Cloud Load Balancing will calculate it dynamically to optimize the number of proxies/clients visible to each backend and vice versa. Must be greater than 0. If `subset_size` is larger than the number of backends/endpoints, then subsetting is disabled.
  },
  &quot;timeoutSec&quot;: 42, # The backend service timeout has a different meaning depending on the type of load balancer. For more information see, Backend service settings. The default is 30 seconds. The full range of timeout values allowed goes from 1 through 2,147,483,647 seconds. This value can be overridden in the PathMatcher configuration of the UrlMap that references this backend service. Not supported when the backend service is referenced by a URL map that is bound to target gRPC proxy that has validateForProxyless field set to true. Instead, use maxStreamDuration.
  &quot;tlsSettings&quot;: { # Configuration for Backend Authenticated TLS and mTLS. May only be specified when the backend protocol is SSL, HTTPS or HTTP2.
    &quot;authenticationConfig&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reference to the BackendAuthenticationConfig resource from the networksecurity.googleapis.com namespace. Can be used in authenticating TLS connections to the backend, as specified by the authenticationMode field. Can only be specified if authenticationMode is not NONE.
    &quot;identity&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Assigns the Managed Identity for the RegionBackendService Workload. Use this property to configure the load balancer back-end to use certificates and roots of trust provisioned by the Managed Workload Identity system. The `managedIdentity` property is the fully-specified SPIFFE ID to use in the SVID presented by the Load Balancer Workload. The SPIFFE ID must be a resource starting with the &quot;spiffe&quot; scheme identifier, followed by the &quot;trustDomain&quot; property value, followed by the path to the Managed Workload Identity. Supported SPIFFE ID format: - spiffe://&lt;trust_domain&gt;/ns/&lt;namespace&gt;/sa/&lt;subject&gt; The Trust Domain within the Managed Identity must refer to a valid Workload Identity Pool. The TrustConfig and CertificateIssuanceConfig will be inherited from the Workload Identity Pool. Restrictions: - If you set the `managedIdentity` property, you cannot manually set the following fields: - tlsSettings.sni - tlsSettings.subjectAltNames - tlsSettings.authenticationConfig When defining a `managedIdentity` for a RegionBackendServices, the corresponding Workload Identity Pool must have a ca_pool configured in the same region. The system will set up a read-only tlsSettings.authenticationConfig for the Managed Identity.
    &quot;sni&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Server Name Indication - see RFC3546 section 3.1. If set, the load balancer sends this string as the SNI hostname in the TLS connection to the backend, and requires that this string match a Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the backend&#x27;s server certificate. With a Regional Internet NEG backend, if the SNI is specified here, the load balancer uses it regardless of whether the Regional Internet NEG is specified with FQDN or IP address and port. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
    &quot;subjectAltNames&quot;: [ # A list of Subject Alternative Names (SANs) that the Load Balancer verifies during a TLS handshake with the backend. When the server presents its X.509 certificate to the Load Balancer, the Load Balancer inspects the certificate&#x27;s SAN field, and requires that at least one SAN match one of the subjectAltNames in the list. This field is limited to 5 entries. When both sni and subjectAltNames[] are specified, the load balancer matches the backend certificate&#x27;s SAN only to subjectAltNames[].
      { # A Subject Alternative Name that the load balancer matches against the SAN field in the TLS certificate provided by the backend, specified as either a DNS name or a URI, in accordance with RFC 5280 4.2.1.6
        &quot;dnsName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a DNS Name.
        &quot;uniformResourceIdentifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SAN specified as a URI.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;usedBy&quot;: [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing given backend service.
    {
      &quot;reference&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for resources referencing given BackendService like UrlMaps, TargetTcpProxies, TargetSslProxies and ForwardingRule.
    },
  ],
  &quot;vpcNetworkScope&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The network scope of the backends that can be added to the backend service. This field can be either GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK or REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK. A backend service with the VPC scope set to GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK is only allowed to have backends in global VPC networks. When the VPC scope is set to REGIONAL_VPC_NETWORK the backend service is only allowed to have backends in regional networks in the same scope as the backend service. Note: if not specified then GLOBAL_VPC_NETWORK will be used.
}

  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
    Allowed values
      1 - v1 error format
      2 - v2 error format

Returns:
  An object of the form:

    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
      {
        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
        &quot;errorDetails&quot;: [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
          {
            &quot;errorInfo&quot;: { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; API when it is not enabled: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;API_DISABLED&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;googleapis.com&quot; &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;resource&quot;: &quot;projects/123&quot;, &quot;service&quot;: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot; } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;STOCKOUT&quot; &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;spanner.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;metadata&quot;: { &quot;availableRegions&quot;: &quot;us-central1,us-east2&quot; } }
              &quot;domain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The logical grouping to which the &quot;reason&quot; belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: &quot;pubsub.googleapis.com&quot;. If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is &quot;googleapis.com&quot;.
              &quot;metadatas&quot;: { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{&quot;instanceLimit&quot;: &quot;100/request&quot;}`, should be returned as, `{&quot;instanceLimitPerRequest&quot;: &quot;100&quot;}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;reason&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
            },
            &quot;help&quot;: { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn&#x27;t enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
              &quot;links&quot;: [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
                { # Describes a URL link.
                  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes what the link offers.
                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of the link.
                },
              ],
            },
            &quot;localizedMessage&quot;: { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
              &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-CH&quot;, &quot;es-MX&quot;
              &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The localized error message in the above locale.
            },
            &quot;quotaInfo&quot;: { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
              &quot;dimensions&quot;: { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
              },
              &quot;futureLimit&quot;: 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limit&quot;: 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit&#x27;s unit depends on the quota type or metric.
              &quot;limitName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the quota limit.
              &quot;metricName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
              &quot;rolloutStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
            },
          },
        ],
        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
      },
    ],
  },
  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata&quot;: {
    &quot;perLocationStatus&quot;: { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;createdVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
        &quot;deletedVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
        &quot;failedToCreateVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
        &quot;targetVmCount&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
  &quot;setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata&quot;: { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
    &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The client operation id.
    &quot;perLocationOperations&quot;: { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
      &quot;a_key&quot;: {
        &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
          &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
          &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
            {
              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
            },
          ],
          &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
        },
        &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
      },
    },
  },
  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
    {
      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
        {
          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
        },
      ],
      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
    },
  ],
  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
}</pre>
</div>

</body></html>